دليل المستخدم

ManualsBrandsNikon ManualsZ SeriesZ 7

Table Of Contents

ﻕﻮﻓ ﺎﻤﻓ 3.00 ﺖﺑﺎﺜﻟﺍ ﺞﻣﺎﻧﺮﺒﻟﺍ ﺕﺍﺫ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻟﺎﺑ ﺹﺎﺨﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻫ

ﻊﺑﺎﺘﻟﺍ ﻞﻳﺰﻨﺘﻟﺍ ﺰﻛﺮﻣ ﻦﻣ ﻞﻳﺰﻨﺘﻠﻟ ﺡﺎﺘﻣ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻠﻟ ﺖﺑﺎﺜﻟﺍ ﺞﻣﺎﻧﺮﺒﻟﺍ ﻦﻣ ﺭﺍﺪﺻﺇ ﺙﺪﺣﺃ

.ﻥﻮﻜﻴﻨﻟ

SB0C03(1X)

6MOA181X-03

ﺀﺎﻨﺜﺘﺳﺎﺑ)

ﹰ

ﺎﻴﺋﺰﺟ ﻭﺃ

ﹰ

ﺎﻴﻠﻛ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻫ ﻦﻣ ﺎﻬﻠﻜﺷ ﻥﺎﻛ ﺎﻤﻬﻣ ﺔﺨﺴﻧ ﻱﺍ ﻞﻤﻋ ﺯﻮﺠﻳ ﻻ

ﻥﻮﻜﻴﻧ ﻦﻣ ﻲﻄﺧ ﺢﻳﺮﺼﺗ ﻥﻭﺩ (ﺕﺎﻌﺟﺍﺮﻤﻟﺍ ﻭﺃ ﺓﺪﻗﺎﻨﻟﺍ ﺕﻻﺎﻘﻤﻟﺍ ﻲﻓ ﺰﺟﻮﻤﻟﺍ ﺱﺎﺒﺘﻗﻻﺍ

.ﻦﺸﻳﺭﻮﺑﺭﻮﻛ

ﺓﺭﻮﻓﺎﻐﻨﺳ ﻲﻓ ﺔﻋﺎﺒﻄﻟﺍ ﺖﻤﺗ

ﺔﻴﻤﻗﺭ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻛ

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

•.ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻟﺍ ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺍ ﻞﺒﻗ ﻞﻣﺎﻜﻟﺎﺑ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻫ ﺃﺮﻗﺍ

• "ﻚﺘﻣﻼﺳ ﻞﺟﻷ" ﻢﺴﻗ ﺓﺀﺍﺮﻗ ﻦﻣ ﺪﻛﺄﺗ ،ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻠﻟ ﺢﻴﺤﺼﻟﺍ ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﻻﺍ ﻥﺎﻤﺿ

.(ix ﺔﺤﻔﺻ)

• ﻉﻮﺟﺮﻟﺍ ﻞﺟﺃ ﻦﻣ ﻪﻴﻟﺇ ﻝﻮﺻﻮﻟﺍ ﻞﻬﺴﻳ ﻥﺎﻜﻣ ﻲﻓ ﻪﺑ ﻆﻔﺘﺣﺍ ،ﻞﻴﻟﺪﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻫ ﺓﺀﺍﺮﻗ ﺪﻋ

.ﻞﺒﻘﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻲﻓ ﻪﻴﻟﺇ

Summary of content (272 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺎﺕ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺭﺑﻮﺭﻳﺸﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪ 3.00‬ﻓﻤﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪SB0C03(1X‬‬ ‫‪6MOA181X-03‬‬ ‫‪Ar‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻨﻐﺎﻓﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 2
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪iv .....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪1 ...................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪27 .......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪41 .....................
PAGE 3
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻲ )‪(pdf‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.
PAGE 4
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.
PAGE 5
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﹸﻣﻌﺪ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ Z 7‬ﻭ‪ .Z 6‬ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪ Z 7‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 6
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‪ii ..................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‪ix ................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ‪xiii...........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪1 ........................................
PAGE 7
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ‪41 .........................................................................(b‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﻭﺿﻊ ‪45 ................................................................................................... (b‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪49 ...............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪49 .................................................................................
PAGE 8
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ‪92 .............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪92 ...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪92 ..........................................................................(AE‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪92 .........................................................................................................
PAGE 9
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪125‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫‪https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/ar/products/492/Z_7.html :Z 7‬‬ ‫‪https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/ar/products/493/Z_6.html :Z 6‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫‪https://onlinemanual.nikonimglib.com/z7_z6/ar/‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪125 .................................................................................
PAGE 10
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪171‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪171 ................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪171 ................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪176 .................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪177 ........................................................................................
PAGE 11
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﻠﻜﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ "ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ" ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮ‪ :‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻳﻨﻄﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻳﻨﻄﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 12
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﺎﺋﻖ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﻃﻔﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 13
‫• ﺃﻃﻔﺊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭﹰﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭﹰﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﺮﻙ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﹸ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ‪.
PAGE 14
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﺑﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻃﺒﻴ ﹰﺒﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ )ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ(‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻴ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﻠﻊ ﻃﻔﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻃﺒﻴ ﹰﺒﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻴ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ • ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻢ ﺑﺬﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻮﺩ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺄﻱ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﺮﺣﺐ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻤﺜﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﺳﺢ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﻭﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻏﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﻕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 18
xvi
PAGE 19
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺺ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪72 ................................................
PAGE 20
‫ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﺎﺑﻊ(‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪194....................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪151 ،8 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪142 ،43 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ‪110................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪90 .............................
PAGE 21
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪7 8 9 10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪20 19 18 17‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪8 ..........................................‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ‪8 ...............................................‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪188...................................‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺯﺭ ‪49 ............................................................K‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺯﺭ ‪51 ..............................................................O‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪10 ،6 ..................................
PAGE 22
‫ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﺎﺑﻊ(‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‪ 6 17 .....................................‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪36 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ 7 64 ،24 .................................................... Fn1‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪37 ........................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ 8 52 ،24 .................................................... Fn2‬ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ‪CPU‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ 9 32 ...................
PAGE 23
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ؛ ﻭﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ" )‪.(180 0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪5 75 ،73 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪74 ........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪6 34 ..........................................
PAGE 24
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ؛ ﻭﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ" )‪.(171 0‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪3 4 5 6 7 8 11 10 9‬‬ ‫‪23456 7 89‬‬ ‫‪21 25 23‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪20 19 18 17 16 15‬‬ ‫‪22 20 1 19 18 13 17 16 15 14‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪11 72 ..
PAGE 25
‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪74 ........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪75 ،73 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪139 ،132 ،111 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪34 ..........................................‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪144.................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ‪133 ،115 .....................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪60 ،10 .................................
PAGE 26
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ )ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻸﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ؛ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ؛ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻦ ﻳﻈﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﹰﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.
PAGE 29
‫❚❚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Z‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺭ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻳﻤﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﺮﹰﺍ ﻣﺰﺩﻭ ﹰﺟﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻤﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻳﻤﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﺩ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻭ ‪ 9‬ﻭ ‪ 72‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﹰﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ‪ .
PAGE 31
‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ i‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫)‪.(95 ،21 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.
PAGE 32
‫❚❚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪.Z‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻏﻄﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﹸﻣﺼﻨﱠﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻇﺎﻓﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻳﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .
PAGE 33
‫ﺯﺭ ‪DISP‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪ DISP‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ DISP‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺴﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪3 ،2‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻖ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻻ ﻳﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) d8‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻻ ﺗﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.
PAGE 34
‫❚❚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ DISP‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺴﻂ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻖ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ 16‬ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
PAGE 35
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻛﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫)‪.(93 ،92 0‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪AF-ON‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪ AF-ON‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪ :D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪125...................................‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪127........................‬‬ ‫‪ :1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪135.........................‬‬ ‫‪ :A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪141..............‬‬ ‫‪ :B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪150.......................................‬‬ ‫‪ :N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪156..................................
PAGE 37
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ(‪.
PAGE 38
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ .G‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) i‬ﺭﻣﺰ ‪(i‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪ i‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)‪ (96 0‬ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )‪.(117 0‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﻕ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.
PAGE 40
‫❚❚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ i‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) f1‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.(i‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪.f1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) f1‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (i‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪) J‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺯﺭ ‪.(18 0 ،"G‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻌﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 41
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫• ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫• ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫• ‪) HDR‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪Control‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‬ ‫• ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫• ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫• ﺗﻌ
PAGE 42
‫ﺯﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )‪ Fn1‬ﻭ‪(Fn2‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ Fn1‬ﻭ‪ Fn2‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) f2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ( ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻭﺯﺭ ‪ Fn2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 43
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺯﺭﹰﺍ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ .J‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪،Fn1‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn2‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Fn2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻋﹸ ﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .2‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ 2‬ﻭ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.
PAGE 44
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﺰﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺰﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• )‪+ NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻫﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‬ ‫• ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫• ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﻉ ﺽ‬ ‫• ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‬ ‫• ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ • ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫• ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ • ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪FV‬‬ ‫• ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪/‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ‪ c‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ
PAGE 45
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﹼﺐ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺰﻭﱠﺩ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﹸﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ EN-EL15b‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺏ "ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ" )‪ (ix 0‬ﻭ"ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ" )‪.(199 0‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ EN-EL15b‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺄﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ )‪ .
PAGE 47
‫ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) CHARGE‬ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﻭ‪ 35‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 48
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) CHARGE‬ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫‪EH-7P‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) CHARGE‬ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ( ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .
PAGE 49
‫‪ D‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) CHARGE‬ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) CHARGE‬ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) CHARGE‬ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ( ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻌﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺟﺎﻧ ﹰﺒﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻭﺍﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 51
‫‪ D‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻲﺀ‪ ،‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ )‪ .(q‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ )‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ L‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ K‬ﺛﻢ ‪ J‬ﺛﻢ ‪ I‬ﻭﺃﺧﻴﺮﹰﺍ ‪ .H‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،H‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺑﱢﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ ،H‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺷﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 53
‫‪ D‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ .Z‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻌﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ .OFF‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ f/4 S‬ﻣﻢ‪.NIKKOR Z 70–24‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ )ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.
PAGE 55
‫‪ D‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪F‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪) FTZ‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ (228 0 ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ .F‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ F‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻓﻚﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﻚﹼ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻔﻚﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪ (q‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )‪ .(w‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻚﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﻛﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻏﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.ON‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ )‪ (Language‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ )‪ (Language‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) 2‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺯﺭ ‪.(18 0 ،"G‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ‪.
PAGE 57
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ )ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺣﺪ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 58
‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺭﻣﺰ ‪") t‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ"(‬ ‫ﺗﹸﺸﻐﻞ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﹸﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻳﻜﻔﻴﺎﻥ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺷﻬﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪ .
PAGE 59
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(b‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) b‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫"ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ" ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 60
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.b‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.b‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﻤﻞ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺿﻊ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﻴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺻﺪﺭﻙ‪.
PAGE 61
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) AF-ON‬ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ(‪ .
PAGE 62
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫)ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(b‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) b‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ "ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ"‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.b‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 64
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪AF-ON‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ؛ ﻻ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ C‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺠﻞ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺗﹸﺴ ﱠ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .
PAGE 66
‫‪ D‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،C‬ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.K‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺻﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 68
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 3‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻻﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﻟﻺﺭﺟﺎﻉ‪ 2 ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ‪×2‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ×4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ×8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪×16‬؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ )ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ h‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ .
PAGE 69
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ O‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ" )‪.(49 0‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .O‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ؛‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ O‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ؛ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ AF-C‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺳﻮﺍ ﹰﺀ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻡ ﻻ )ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ )‪ (92 0‬ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﹺﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺄﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪ e‬ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻷﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﻔﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﻓﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ؛ ‪ .
PAGE 75
‫❚❚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪) a4‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ .
PAGE 76
‫❚❚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ‪/‬ﻋﻴﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ‪) a4‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻭﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻠ ﹰﺒﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﻓﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ‪ .
PAGE 77
‫❚❚ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﺪﺍﻑ؛ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ AF-ON‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ(‪ .
PAGE 78
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪ :W‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ(‪ .
PAGE 79
‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪W‬‬ ‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺇﻻ‬ ‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺣ ﹰﺪﺍ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ؛ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﻄﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ X‬ﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )‪ (I‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 81
‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ )‪ (E‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻔﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪ 16‬ﻣﻢ‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻟﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ )‪ (j‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﹸ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ H‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫‪ G‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪ M‬ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‬ ‫‪*K‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻺﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.
PAGE 84
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ K‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ L‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪*K‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫‪-2500‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫‪10000‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹺﻗﺲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ )ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،(0 104 ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.
PAGE 85
‫‪") D D‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ"(‬ ‫‪) D‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪4‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪) 4‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) 5‬ﻓﻼﺵ( ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﻐﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) d5‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ "ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﺎﻣﺖ"‪ .
PAGE 87
‫‪ D‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟـﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻳﻜﺘﻢ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺭﻏﻢ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﺃﻭ ‪ K‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ .
PAGE 88
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﻲ ‪ Capture NX-D‬ﻭ‪،ViewNX-i‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ K‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.i‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.i‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﹰ ﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﹰﺎ‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ K‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.i‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.i‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .J‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ‪P‬؛ ﻭﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 3-2‬ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 90
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪ b‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ"‬ ‫ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪.(45 ،41 0‬‬ ‫• ‪ P‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ‪ :‬ﺗﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 91
‫‪ :P‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )"ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻥ"(‪ .‬ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻄﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻥ )‪ .(U‬ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 92
‫‪ :A‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪ .‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )‪.
PAGE 93
‫‪ :M‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪ "×200‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ‪ 1/8000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )‪ .(80 0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 94
‫‪ D‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) b1‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 1/3‬ﺃﻭ ‪.EV 1/2‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ U1‬ﻭ‪ U2‬ﻭ‪U3‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻸﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ U1‬ﻭ‪ U2‬ﻭ‪ U3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻋ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 96
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.4‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ U1‬ﺃﻭ ‪U2‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ U3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ U1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ U2‬ﺃﻭ ‪ U3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﹰﺎ‪.
PAGE 97
‫‪ D‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ U1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ U2‬ﺃﻭ ‪.
PAGE 98
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(M‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺘﺢ‪ :‬ﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﻮ ﹰﺣﺎ ﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫• ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ :‬ﻓﺘﺢ )ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 35‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪f/25 :‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 99
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪) Bulb‬ﻓﺘﺢ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Time‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ‪ :‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) S‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ S‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺀ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ‪ ISO 64‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪) ISO 25600‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪ Z 6‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ISO 100‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ،(ISO 51200‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0.3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ EV 1‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﻣﻦ ‪ 0.3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ EV 2‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ b‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺎ‪.
PAGE 101
‫‪Lo 1–Lo 0.3 D‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ Lo 0.3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Lo 1‬ﻣﻊ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ EV 1–0.3‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Lo 0.3‬ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ‪ (Z 7) ISO 50‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(Z 6) 80‬ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Lo 1‬ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ‪ISO 32‬‬ ‫)‪ (Z 7‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .(Z 6) 50‬ﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ؛ ﻭﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﹸﻨﺼﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 102
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ "ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ" ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ S‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ "ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ"‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺯﺭ ‪ S‬ﻭﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .
PAGE 103
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) E‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،b‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪) EV −5‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ( ﻭ ‪EV +5‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ( ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪) EV 1/3‬ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ؛ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻦ ‪ −3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .(EV +3‬ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‪.
PAGE 104
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﻼﻑ ‪ ،0.0±‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪) E‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ E‬ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ‪ .E‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ .±0‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 105
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) E/c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ" ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ (E) c‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 106
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ X‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬ ‫)ﻣﻤﺘﺪ(‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 9‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ (Z 7‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 12‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ .(Z 6‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )‪.(90 0‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 107
‫‪ D‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ )ﻣﻤﺘﺪ(‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )‪.(93 0‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺳﻴﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.
PAGE 108
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )‪.(45 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ U‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪ c‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫‪ 50‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺤ ﹴﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ )‪ (Z 7‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 3‬ﹴ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ )‪ (Z 6‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .
PAGE 109
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ AF-S‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ E‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 110
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻛﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 111
‫❚❚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.
PAGE 112
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )‪ (AF-S‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻘﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 113
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬؛ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.i‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻋﹸ ﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) i‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.
PAGE 114
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ D-Lighting 8 97 ................ Picture Control‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪113..................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ‪ 9 101.............................................‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪114.............................................‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ 10 107......................
PAGE 115
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ n‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ Q‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ R‬ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ S‬ﻣﺸﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪ .
PAGE 116
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪ ،Control‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.3‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪.(99 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪ Control‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 117
‫❚❚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Picture Control‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫‪ Picture Control‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪ ،Control‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪ .Control‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ،1‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪0.
PAGE 118
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﺨﻴﻢ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Creative Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻭﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻘﺎﺀ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﺼﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻭﻧﻘﺎﺀ‪.
PAGE 119
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ"‪.
PAGE 120
‫❚❚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .3‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺒﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 121
‫❚❚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.3‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬ ‫)‪ (G‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ–)‪ (M‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬ ‫)‪ (A‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺒﺮﻱ–)‪ (B‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ )‪ (A‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺒﺮﻱ–)‪ (B‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ )‪ (G‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ–‬ ‫)‪ (M‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 122
‫❚❚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺤﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻈﻼﻝ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،i‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.
PAGE 123
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﹺﻗﺲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ‪r‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ‪ r‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ .
PAGE 124
‫‪ D‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ HDR‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) c3‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( < ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 125
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﺟﻴﺪ‪m‬‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻭﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ .JPEG‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪m‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﹰ‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ .NEF (RAW‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺳﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪m‬‬ ‫)‪JPEG + NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ )‪.
PAGE 126
‫‪NEF (RAW) A‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪) NEF (RAW‬ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ "*‪ (".nef‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﻲ ‪ ViewNX-i‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Capture NX-D‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﹸﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎﺀ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﺎ ‪ ViewNX-i‬ﻭ‪ Capture NX-D‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻨﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 127
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫)‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ TIFF/JPEG‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ )‪ .NEF (RAW‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺳﻮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ‪.TIFF‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟـ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 128
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫‪ K‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫‪b، P، S، A، M‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ M‬ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪P، A‬‬ ‫‪ L‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 129
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫‪ L‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻧﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺨﺼﺺ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪ M‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) b3‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ(‪ .
PAGE 130
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ )ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺫﻛﻴﺔ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﹸﺸﻐﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪.SnapBridge‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .J‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪J‬‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﹸ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 131
‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺎﻓﻆ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻲ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.
PAGE 132
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺯﺭ ‪) E/c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(" )‪.(87 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ U‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪ V‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ X‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ )ﻣﻤﺘﺪ(‬ ‫‪ E‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫‪ W‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.3‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 3‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 133
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪Normal‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤ ﱠ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﹸ‬ ‫‪Sport D‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﱠﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﱢﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﻨ ﱡﺒﺆﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ E‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 134
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ" )‪.
PAGE 135
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ D-Lighting 8 118.............. Picture Control‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪123..................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ‪ 9 118.............................................‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪123........................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ 10 119.........
PAGE 136
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.(97 0) "Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ"‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 137
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ( ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﺣﺠﻢ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ "‪ ("m‬ﻭﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 138
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺻﺎﻣﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ "ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ" ﻟـ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 5‬ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪ .
PAGE 139
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ bA‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ b1‬ﻭ‪) b20‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ ،bA‬ﻳﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 140
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ FX‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﺴﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ "FX‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ DX‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﺴﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ."DX‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.
PAGE 141
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ" )‪ ،(111 0‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﺣﻆ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.(112 0) "Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "‪D-Lighting‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻄﺔ" )‪ .
PAGE 142
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ"‬ ‫)‪.(115 0‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ" )‪.
PAGE 143
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫‪https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/ar/products/492/Z_7.html :Z 7‬‬ ‫‪https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/ar/products/493/Z_6.html :Z 6‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫‪https://onlinemanual.nikonimglib.
PAGE 144
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪RGB‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ
PAGE 145
‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪(36×24) FX‬‬ ‫‪(24×16) DX‬‬ ‫‪(30×24) 5:4‬‬ ‫‪(24×24) 1:1‬‬ ‫‪(36×20) 16:9‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.
PAGE 146
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﺟﻴﺪ‪m‬‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪m‬‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪m‬‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫)‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﺟﻴﺪ‪m‬‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪m‬‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪m‬‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫)‪TIFF (RGB‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪JPEG/TIFF‬‬ ‫)‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺑﺖ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ 128‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ
PAGE 147
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻃﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‪ .
PAGE 148
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺗﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺯﺍ ﹴﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺍﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﻛﺌﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﻧﻴﻢ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﺤﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺑﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ 130‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 149
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪sRGB‬‬ ‫‪Adobe RGB‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ‪NR‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ ISO NR‬ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪ Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(sRGB‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 150
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ‪ +‬ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻄﻔﺄ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪+1.0 – −3.
PAGE 151
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ )ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ )ﻛﺒﻴﺮ(‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪Normal‬‬ ‫‪Sport‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍ
PAGE 152
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ × ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺭ
PAGE 153
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪FX‬‬ ‫‪DX‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪3840×2160‬؛ ‪30p‬‬ ‫‪3840×2160‬؛ ‪25p‬‬ ‫‪3840×2160‬؛ ‪24p‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪120p‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪100p‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪60p‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪50p‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪30p‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪25p‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪24p‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪) 30p ×4‬ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ(‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪) 25p ×4‬ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ(‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪) 24p ×5‬ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ
PAGE 154
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪MOV‬‬ ‫‪MP4‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(M‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬ﻝ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(M‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪ 136‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(MOV‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.
PAGE 155
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺗﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺯﺍ ﹴﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺍﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﻛﺌﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﻧﻴﻢ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﺤﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺑﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 156
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ ISO NR‬ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ 138‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪ Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‪.
PAGE 157
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﻭﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎ ﹰﺣﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.
PAGE 158
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻫﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫‪30-0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 140‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.
PAGE 159
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ a‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‬ ‫‪ a1‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-C‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪.
PAGE 160
‫‪ a7‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.
PAGE 161
‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬ ‫‪ a13‬ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 162
‫‪ c3‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪ d‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ d1‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ‪CL‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ–‪ 1‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ d2‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫‪200–1‬‬ ‫‪ d3‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪ d4‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ–‪ 0.2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 163
‫‪ d7‬ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪ d8‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬ ‫‪ d9‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 164
‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪ e4‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ c ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪ e5‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ‪ (CLS) Creative Lighting System‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 165
‫‪ f‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪ f1‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 166
‫‪ f2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪Fn1‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪Fn2‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪AF-ON‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn2‬ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ f3‬ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ f4‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ‪ J‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 167
‫‪ g‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪ g1‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻫﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪ g2
PAGE 168
‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ‪ J‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫‪ g3‬ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ‬ ‫‪ g4‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪+5 – −5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(4‬‬ ‫‪ g5‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.
PAGE 169
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ )‪(Language‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ‪.
PAGE 170
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺷﻐﻞ‪/‬ﻭﻗﻒ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪CPU‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﺼﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻖ ﻧﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑ
PAGE 171
‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪N-Log‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )‪(WR‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪LED‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 172
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﺮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻭﺟﺔ )ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ )ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ(‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪MAC‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭ‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻯ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 173
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ )‪(WT-7‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ‪ ftp‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺛﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ .WT-7‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪.WT-7‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 174
‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )‪.NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻘﺘﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪D-Lighting‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﺢ "ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ‪.
PAGE 175
‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫‪.N‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺘﻄﺎﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 176
‫‪ O‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪ m/‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 20‬ﺑﻨ ﹰﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺗﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ 158‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪.
PAGE 177
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• "ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ" )‪(160 0‬‬ ‫• "ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﻄﺄ" )‪(166 0‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 178
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻛﺒﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﻨﺰﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 179
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺀ‪ :‬ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) Bulb‬ﻓﺘﺢ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Time‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺒﻂﺀ ﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) d4‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‪.
PAGE 180
‫ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) d8‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 181
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻈﻠﻢ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ :‬ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺃﻭ ‪ JPEG+NEF‬ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ‪) HDR‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 182
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻭ ‪ TIFF‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻃﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Capture NX-D‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬ ‫)‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 183
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﺮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻭﺟﺔ )ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ( < ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 184
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪H‬‬ ‫‪H‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫––‪F‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) Time‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.S‬‬ ‫‪Time‬‬ ‫‪Busy‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺪﺕ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 185
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫—‬ ‫)ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ(‬ ‫‪Full‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫‪Err‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻪ؛‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ؛ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﻔﺾ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪ .
PAGE 186
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺼﺤﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ [–E–] .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Card, Err‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 187
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺤﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ ،DCF‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻟﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻻ‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 188
‫‪ 170‬ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬
PAGE 189
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ( ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﻸﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 190
‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪139 ،133 ،54...................................‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪138 ،131 ،113 ...............‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪137 ،130 ،97..................... Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ‪136 ،129 ،101 ،64....................‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪128 ،107 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪135 ،127 ،122 .....................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪128 ،109 .....................
PAGE 191
‫‪ D‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻋﺪ ﺗﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ‬ ‫)ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 192
‫❚❚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪7 8‬‬ ‫‪12 3 4 5 6‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪12 72 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻥ‪73 ................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪77 .............................‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪148............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪146.............................‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪75 ،73 .......................................
PAGE 193
‫‪27 28‬‬ ‫‪20 21 22 23 24 25 26‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ‪30 154............................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﺮﺍﻥ ‪31 154............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪112.................................Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪33 131......................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪34 144.................................................
PAGE 194
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1 2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪8 45 ........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ "ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ"‪9 46 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪153...........‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪11 136 ،135 ،119 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ‪12 45 ...............................
PAGE 195
‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪11 12 13‬‬ ‫‪4 5 6 7 8 9 10‬‬ ‫‪1 2 3‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫‪43‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫‪36 35 33 31 29 28 27 26 24 23‬‬ ‫‪34 32 30‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪12 34 ..........................................‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪13 145.............‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ‪14 133 ،115 .....................
PAGE 196
‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪133...‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪133............................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪133..........................................ADL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪133.........................................................HDR‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ( ‪133.........................................
PAGE 197
‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪136 ،135 ،119 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪135..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪153...........‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪45 ........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ "ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ"‪46 .........................
PAGE 198
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪3 4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ 8 148............................‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪236 ،34 ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪75 ،73 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ 9 85 ............‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪87 ...............................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪ 10 85 .............
PAGE 199
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ‪ Creative Lighting System‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻮﺭ )‪ (CLS‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻ ﹰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.
PAGE 200
‫ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪ qA‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪SB-600‬‬ ‫‪SB-500‬‬ ‫‪SB-5000‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪TTL‬‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪SU-800‬‬ ‫‪SB-910‬‬ ‫‪SB-900‬‬ ‫‪SB-800‬‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪SB-R200‬‬ ‫‪SB-700‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫]‪ [A:B‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪SB-400‬‬ ‫‪i-TTL i-TTL‬‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪SB-300‬‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫— ‪✔ ✔4‬‬ ‫— ‪— ✔4‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫— ‪— ✔5‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫
PAGE 201
‫‪ 1‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﹰ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ qA/A‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ qA‬ﻭ ‪ A‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ‪ i-TTL‬ﻭ‪ qA‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ GN‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.
PAGE 202
‫‪ D‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ i-TTL‬ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ ،(qA‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ TTL‬ﻭﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.
PAGE 203
‫‪ D‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ ،CLS‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ SLR‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ .CLS‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺌﺔ "ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ SLR‬ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ‪ SB-80DX‬ﻭ‪ SB-28DX‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪.SB-50DX‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ i-TTL‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 64‬ﻭ‪ (Z 7) 12800‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ 100‬ﻭ‪ .
PAGE 204
‫ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪ 186‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :EN-EL15b‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ EN-EL15b‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺋﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﻭﻣﻤﺜﻠﻲ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ ،EN-EL15/EN-EL15a‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )‪.
PAGE 205
‫ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ‪GPS‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) MC-DC2‬ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﺮ(‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ‬ ‫‪ MC-DC2‬ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.
PAGE 206
‫• ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪/WR-R10‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ :WR-T10‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ WR-R10‬ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) WR-T10‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪ ،WR-R10‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﻮﻻﺕ ‪ USB‬ﻭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ‪.
PAGE 207
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫• ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :ME-1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ME-1‬ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :ME-W1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Camera Control Pro 2‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‪ .
PAGE 208
‫‪ D‬ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB/HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ )ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬؛ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺒﻚ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪.
PAGE 209
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪(q‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪.(w‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.EP-5B‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺟﺎﻧ ﹰﺒﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 210
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.EH-5b/EH-5c‬‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ (e‬ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ .(r‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ P‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 211
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﱠﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻻﻋﺘﻨﺎﺀ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺧﺰﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﺎﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻔﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻄﺮﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻑ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﺋﺔ‪ .
PAGE 212
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺸﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﹸﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ "ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ"‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 213
‫‪ D‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺃﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 214
‫❚❚ "ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ"‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ" )‪ .(194 0‬ﻇﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 215
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ؛ ﻓﻨﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺑﺮ‪ .
PAGE 216
‫‪ D‬ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻠﺘﺼﻖ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ )ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺯﻳﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ(‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻠﺘﺼﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪ .
PAGE 217
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻄﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻘﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺟﺎﻓﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻴﺒﻪ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻤﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺻﺪﺃ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪.
PAGE 218
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﻼﺡ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﹰ ﺑﻤﺎﺀ ﻧﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺟﻔﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻻ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪.
PAGE 219
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ؛ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ،99.99%‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 0.01%‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ )ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ )ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ(‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﻀﺮﺍﺀ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻄﻔﺄﺓ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ‪ .
PAGE 220
‫• ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺌﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻐﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻓﺮﻏﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪° 15‬ﻡ ﻭ ‪° 25‬ﻡ )ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺩﺓ(‪ .‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺃﺷﻬﺮ‪.
PAGE 221
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺷﺤﻨﺖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪° 5‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 222
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪Z 6/Z 7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫‪ 204‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪Nikon Z‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ NIKKOR‬ﺑﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪Z‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ NIKKOR‬ﺑﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ F‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ؛ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‬ ‫• ‪ 45.7 :Z 7‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫• ‪ 24.5 :Z 6‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪ 23.9 × 35.
PAGE 223
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪(24×24) 1:1‬‬‫‪) 5504 × 5504‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ 30.3 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫‪) 4128 × 4128‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ 17.0 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫‪) 2752 × 2752‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ 7.6 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪(36×20) 16:9‬‬‫‪) 4640 × 8256‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ 38.3 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫‪) 3480 × 6192‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ 21.5 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫‪) 2320 × 4128‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ 9.
PAGE 224
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﻳﻮﺑﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ 206‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫• )‪ 12 :NEF (RAW‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 14‬ﺑﺖ؛ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺿﻐﻂ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺿﻐﻂ؛ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻤﻖ ﺑﺖ ‪ 12‬ﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(‬ ‫• )‪TIFF (RGB‬‬ ‫• ‪ :JPEG‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ JPEG-Baseline‬ﻣﻊ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫)ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ‪ ،(4
PAGE 225
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪-8‬ﺳﻢ‪-3.
PAGE 226
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )‪ ،ISO 100‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪° 20 ،f/2.0‬ﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ‪ TTL‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ 75%‬ﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﻣﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻌﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ 4‬ﻣﻢ )ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 1.
PAGE 227
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻫﺠﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ )ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ • ‪) EV +19 – −2 :Z 7‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫‪(EV +19 – −4‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪) EV +19 – −3.5 :Z 6 • ،ISO 100 ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ 20 ،f/2.
PAGE 228
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ؛ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ‪ ISO 518‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ i-TTL‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬ ‫‪ Creative Lighting System‬ﺑﻬﺎ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ،FV‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪FP‬‬ ‫)‪ (CLS‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ
PAGE 229
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫‪MP4 ،MOV‬‬ ‫‪ MPEG-4/H.
PAGE 230
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪/Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪ 212‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ )‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 9‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 72‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﻣﻊ ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺺ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪(SuperSpeed USB) C‬؛ ﻳﹸﻮﺻﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪C‬‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ‪ MC-DC2‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎ
PAGE 231
‫‪/Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ(‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪4.2‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ 2480-2402 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ 2480-2402 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ )‪:(EIRP‬‬ ‫ ‪ :Z 7‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ 1.5 :‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻁ‬‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ 0 :‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻁ‬ ‫ ‪ :Z 6‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ 1.9 :‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻁ‬‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ 0.
PAGE 232
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﻤﻖ( ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 67.5 × 100.5 × 134‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 675‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ؛ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 585‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ )ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪° 0‬ﻡ–‪° 40‬ﻡ‬ ‫‪ 85%‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻜﺜﻴﻒ(‬ ‫• ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ (CIPA‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻫﻲ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 233
‫❚❚ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪) EH-7P‬ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ×‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻖ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ 240–100‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 60/50 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 0.5 ،‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ 5.0‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 3.0/‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ EN-EL15b‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪° 0‬ﻡ–‪° 40‬ﻡ‬ ‫‪ 58.5 × 26.5 × 65.
PAGE 234
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺳﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 235
‫‪ A‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ CFexpress‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ CompactFlash‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‪ NVM Express .‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ NVM Express Inc.‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‪ IOS .‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪ Cisco Systems، Inc.‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Windows‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Microsoft‬‬ ‫‪ Corporation‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ Mac .
PAGE 236
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪(FreeType2) FreeType‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺧﺎﺿﻌﺔ ﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ © ﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ‪ FreeType‬ﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪2012‬‬ ‫)‪ .(https://www.freetype.org‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪) MIT‬ﺣﺮﻑﺑﺎﺯ(‬ ‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺧﺎﺿﻌﺔ ﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ © ﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ‪ HarfBuzz‬ﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪2018‬‬ ‫)‪ .(https://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Unicode® Character Database License (Unicode® Character Database) A‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪.
PAGE 237
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ f/4 S‬ﻣﻢ‪NIKKOR Z 70–24‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻃﻘﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ f/4 S‬ﻣﻢ‪NIKKOR Z 70–24‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﱠﺮ ﺃﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪.
PAGE 238
‫ﺗﺤﺠﺐ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﺛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻫﺞ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.
PAGE 239
‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻓﻚ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 240
‫❚❚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺤﺐ؛ ﻭﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 24‬ﻭ‪ 70‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻛﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ )‪ (I‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺴﺤﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.
PAGE 241
‫❚❚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪ (I‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪(I‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻴﺔ )‪ (w‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﺤﺎﺫﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ I‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪.(K‬‬ ‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ I‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.
PAGE 242
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪.CPU‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻟﻠﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﱢﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺰﱢﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺻﺪﺃ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪.
PAGE 243
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺎ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﹸﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﱠﻄﺨﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﱠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻗﻄﻨﻴﱠﺔ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﹰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﱠﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻴﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﺒﻠﱠﻠﺔ ﺑﺨﻔﱠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻘﻄﱠ ﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﺜﺎﻧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .
PAGE 244
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ‪ 72‬ﻣﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪LC-72B‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ‪LF-N1‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪HB-85‬‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪CL-C1‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﺷﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻼﺷﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺰﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﱠﺮ ﻟﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﻟﻜﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻠﹼﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 245
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪Nikon Z‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪ 70 – 24‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪f/4‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﺼﻮﻯ‬ ‫‪ 14‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹰﺍ ﻓﻲ ‪ 11‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ED‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪ ED‬ﺷﺒﻪ ﻛﺮﻭﻱ ﻭ‪ 3‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺷﺒﻪ ﻛﺮﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻭﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻐﻠﱠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭ(‬ ‫• ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪´20 ° 34 – ° 84 :FX‬‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪´50 ° 22 – ° 61 :DX‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﻣﻠﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮﻱ )‪(70 ،50 ،35 ،28 ،24‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ‪ 0.
PAGE 246
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪FTZ‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ NIKKOR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ F‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ‪ Z‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻼ ﻣﺮﺁﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪) F‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ SLR‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪) 1‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ .1 NIKKOR‬ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻃﻘﻢ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ .
PAGE 247
‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ‪) F‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻻﺭﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ‪) Z‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ‪CPU‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪229 FTZ‬‬
PAGE 248
‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻭﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻭﻏﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 249
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ )‪ ،(e‬ﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ )‪.(r‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ )‪ (q‬ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )‪ .(w‬ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪.
PAGE 250
‫‪ D‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CPU‬ﻭﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ )ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ CPU‬ﻭﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺤﻠﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﱟ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ؛ ﻓﻼ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺷﻌﺮﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ f/2.
PAGE 251
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ .NIKKOR F‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﹼﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺧﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 252
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﻫﻮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﺵ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﻫﻮﺍﺀ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺮﻗﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻔﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﺃ‪ .
PAGE 253
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ XQD‬ﻭ‪) CFexpress‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ .(B‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ‪ 45‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ (×300‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺑﻄﺄ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪.
PAGE 254
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ Sony G-series QD-G64E XQD‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ 64‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ (36×24) FX‬ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻮ ‪.
PAGE 255
‫‪:Z 6‬‬ ‫)‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬ ‫)‪TIFF (RGB‬‬ ‫‪JPEG 3‬‬ ‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫‪ 14‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫‪ 14‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫‪ 14‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 22.5‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 16.1‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 12.7‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 28.2‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 20.4‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 24.8‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 38.5‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 44.
PAGE 256
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ 1 EN-EL15b‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .
PAGE 257
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺧﺎﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺪﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺪﻳﺮ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ :‬ﻛﻮﺑﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﻥ ﻭﺳﻮﺭﻳﺎ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﹸ ﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﹸﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ‪.
PAGE 258
‫ﺍﻷﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﻏﻢ ﺃﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻶﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮ ﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﻪ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺮﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻻﻧﺒﻌﺎﺛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﹸﻣﻌﺮﱢﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﻟﻬﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .
PAGE 259
‫‪ A‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 260
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪) b‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪72 ،45 ،41 .....................................‬‬ ‫‪) P‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ(‪73 ،72 ..................................‬‬ ‫‪) S‬ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟـﻮﻳــﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪73 ،72 .............................‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪74 ،72 ................................‬‬ ‫‪) M‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪75 ،72 ...........................................................‬‬ ‫‪77 ،72 ......................................................... U1/U2/U3‬‬ ‫‪) U‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ(‪114 ،90 ،87...................
PAGE 261
‫‪N‬‬ ‫)‪107 ........................................................ NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫‪218 .......................................................... PictBridge‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪107 .....................................................................RGB‬‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫‪) S‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‪109 ..............................................................‬‬ ‫‪40.......................................................... SnapBridge‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪107 .........................................................
PAGE 262
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪،55......‬‬ ‫‪116‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪124 ،116 ،56 ............‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ‪124 ،116 ،55‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪124 ،116، 54 .....‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ‪8 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪124 ،116 ،62 ،53............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪68.....................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ‪85 ،76 .................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪85....
PAGE 263
‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ( ‪101 ،65 .....‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‪101 ،65 ..........‬‬ ‫ﻁ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪212 ....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻅ‬ ‫ﻇﻞ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‪101 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﻉ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪238 ......................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪204 ................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪219 ،36 ...........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‪49 ,11...............
PAGE 264
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻕ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪97.............(Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) CHARGE‬ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ( ‪30 ،29 ............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ‪111 ..................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪111 .............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪119 ،88 .................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪217 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪177 ،8 ..................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪38...................
PAGE 265
247
PAGE 266
248
PAGE 267
249
PAGE 268
250
PAGE 269
251
PAGE 270
252
PAGE 271
PAGE 272
‫ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺎﺕ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺭﺑﻮﺭﻳﺸﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪ 3.00‬ﻓﻤﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪SB1F05(1X‬‬ ‫‪6MOA181X-05‬‬ ‫‪Ar‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬ ‫• ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.